linux/include/net/mac80211.h
<<
>>
Prefs
   1/* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
   2/*
   3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
   4 *
   5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
   6 * Copyright 2006-2007  Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
   7 * Copyright 2007-2010  Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
   8 * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
   9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
  10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2020 Intel Corporation
  11 */
  12
  13#ifndef MAC80211_H
  14#define MAC80211_H
  15
  16#include <linux/bug.h>
  17#include <linux/kernel.h>
  18#include <linux/if_ether.h>
  19#include <linux/skbuff.h>
  20#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
  21#include <net/cfg80211.h>
  22#include <net/codel.h>
  23#include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
  24#include <asm/unaligned.h>
  25
  26/**
  27 * DOC: Introduction
  28 *
  29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
  30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
  31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
  32 * drivers.
  33 */
  34
  35/**
  36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
  37 *
  38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
  39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
  40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
  41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
  42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
  43 * tasklet function.
  44 *
  45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
  46 *       use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
  47 */
  48
  49/**
  50 * DOC: Warning
  51 *
  52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
  53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
  54 */
  55
  56/**
  57 * DOC: Frame format
  58 *
  59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
  60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
  61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
  62 * hardware.
  63 *
  64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
  65 *
  66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
  67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
  68 *
  69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
  70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
  71 */
  72
  73/**
  74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
  75 *
  76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
  77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
  78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
  79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
  80 *
  81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
  82 * suspend.
  83 *
  84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
  85 *
  86 */
  87
  88/**
  89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
  90 *
  91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
  92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
  93 * between different stations/interfaces.
  94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
  95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
  96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
  97 *
  98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
  99 * driver operation.
 100 *
 101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
 102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
 103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
 104 *
 105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
 106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
 107 *
 108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
 109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
 110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
 111 *
 112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
 113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
 114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
 115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
 116 * ieee80211_return_txq().
 117 *
 118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
 119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
 120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
 121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
 122 * .release_buffered_frames().
 123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
 124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
 125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
 126 */
 127
 128struct device;
 129
 130/**
 131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
 132 *
 133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
 134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
 135 */
 136enum ieee80211_max_queues {
 137        IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =          16,
 138        IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =       BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
 139};
 140
 141#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE        0xff
 142
 143/**
 144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
 145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
 146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
 147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
 148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
 149 */
 150enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
 151        IEEE80211_AC_VO         = 0,
 152        IEEE80211_AC_VI         = 1,
 153        IEEE80211_AC_BE         = 2,
 154        IEEE80211_AC_BK         = 3,
 155};
 156
 157/**
 158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
 159 *
 160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
 161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
 162 *
 163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
 164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
 165 *      2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
 166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
 167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
 168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
 169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
 170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
 171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
 172 */
 173struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
 174        u16 txop;
 175        u16 cw_min;
 176        u16 cw_max;
 177        u8 aifs;
 178        bool acm;
 179        bool uapsd;
 180        bool mu_edca;
 181        struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
 182};
 183
 184struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
 185        unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
 186        unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
 187        unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
 188        unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
 189};
 190
 191/**
 192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
 193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
 194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
 195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
 196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
 197 *      this is used only with channel switching with CSA
 198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
 199 */
 200enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
 201        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH          = BIT(0),
 202        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS      = BIT(1),
 203        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR          = BIT(2),
 204        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL        = BIT(3),
 205        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH      = BIT(4),
 206};
 207
 208/**
 209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
 210 *
 211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
 212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
 213 *
 214 * @def: the channel definition
 215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
 216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
 217 *      active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
 218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
 219 *      after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
 220 *      this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
 221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
 222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
 223 *      sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
 224 */
 225struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
 226        struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
 227        struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
 228
 229        u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
 230
 231        bool radar_enabled;
 232
 233        u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
 234};
 235
 236/**
 237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
 238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
 239 *      exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
 240 *      needs to be switched from one to the other.
 241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
 242 *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
 243 *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
 244 *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
 245 *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
 246 *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
 247 *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
 248 *      for changes/removal.)
 249 */
 250enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
 251        CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
 252        CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
 253};
 254
 255/**
 256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
 257 *
 258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
 259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
 260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
 261 * done.
 262 *
 263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
 264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
 265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
 266 */
 267struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
 268        struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
 269        struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
 270        struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
 271};
 272
 273/**
 274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
 275 *
 276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
 277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
 278 *
 279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
 280 *      also implies a change in the AID.
 281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
 282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
 283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
 284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
 285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
 286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
 287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
 288 *      reason (IBSS and managed mode)
 289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
 290 *      new beacon (beaconing modes)
 291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
 292 *      enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
 293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
 294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
 295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
 296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
 297 *      that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
 298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
 299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
 300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
 304 *      changed
 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
 306 *      currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
 308 *      note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
 309 *      context had been assigned.
 310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
 311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
 312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
 313 *      keep alive) changed.
 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
 316 *      functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
 317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
 318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
 319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
 320 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
 322 *      status changed.
 323 *
 324 */
 325enum ieee80211_bss_change {
 326        BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC               = 1<<0,
 327        BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT        = 1<<1,
 328        BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE        = 1<<2,
 329        BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT            = 1<<3,
 330        BSS_CHANGED_HT                  = 1<<4,
 331        BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES         = 1<<5,
 332        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT          = 1<<6,
 333        BSS_CHANGED_BSSID               = 1<<7,
 334        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON              = 1<<8,
 335        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED      = 1<<9,
 336        BSS_CHANGED_CQM                 = 1<<10,
 337        BSS_CHANGED_IBSS                = 1<<11,
 338        BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER          = 1<<12,
 339        BSS_CHANGED_QOS                 = 1<<13,
 340        BSS_CHANGED_IDLE                = 1<<14,
 341        BSS_CHANGED_SSID                = 1<<15,
 342        BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP       = 1<<16,
 343        BSS_CHANGED_PS                  = 1<<17,
 344        BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER             = 1<<18,
 345        BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS              = 1<<19,
 346        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO         = 1<<20,
 347        BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH           = 1<<21,
 348        BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
 349        BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS           = 1<<23,
 350        BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE          = 1<<24,
 351        BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE          = 1<<25,
 352        BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER       = 1<<26,
 353        BSS_CHANGED_TWT                 = 1<<27,
 354        BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD          = 1<<28,
 355        BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR        = 1<<29,
 356        BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY      = 1<<30,
 357        BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
 358
 359        /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
 360};
 361
 362/*
 363 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
 364 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
 365 * filtering will be disabled.
 366 */
 367#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
 368
 369/**
 370 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
 371 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
 372 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
 373 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
 374 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
 375 *      they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
 376 *      once each time the timeout triggers.
 377 */
 378enum ieee80211_event_type {
 379        RSSI_EVENT,
 380        MLME_EVENT,
 381        BAR_RX_EVENT,
 382        BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
 383};
 384
 385/**
 386 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
 387 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
 388 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
 389 */
 390enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
 391        RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
 392        RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
 393};
 394
 395/**
 396 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
 397 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
 398 */
 399struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
 400        enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
 401};
 402
 403/**
 404 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
 405 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
 406 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
 407 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
 408 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
 409 */
 410enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
 411        AUTH_EVENT,
 412        ASSOC_EVENT,
 413        DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
 414        DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
 415};
 416
 417/**
 418 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
 419 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
 420 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
 421 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
 422 */
 423enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
 424        MLME_SUCCESS,
 425        MLME_DENIED,
 426        MLME_TIMEOUT,
 427};
 428
 429/**
 430 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
 431 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
 432 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
 433 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
 434 */
 435struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
 436        enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
 437        enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
 438        u16 reason;
 439};
 440
 441/**
 442 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
 443 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
 444 * @tid: the tid
 445 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
 446 */
 447struct ieee80211_ba_event {
 448        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
 449        u16 tid;
 450        u16 ssn;
 451};
 452
 453/**
 454 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
 455 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
 456 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
 457 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
 458 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
 459 * @u:union holding the fields above
 460 */
 461struct ieee80211_event {
 462        enum ieee80211_event_type type;
 463        union {
 464                struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
 465                struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
 466                struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
 467        } u;
 468};
 469
 470/**
 471 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
 472 *
 473 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
 474 *
 475 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
 476 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
 477 */
 478struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
 479        u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
 480        u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
 481};
 482
 483/**
 484 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
 485 *
 486 * @lci: LCI subelement content
 487 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
 488 * @lci_len: LCI data length
 489 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
 490 */
 491struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
 492        const u8 *lci;
 493        const u8 *civicloc;
 494        size_t lci_len;
 495        size_t civicloc_len;
 496};
 497
 498/**
 499 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
 500 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
 501 *
 502 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
 503 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
 504 */
 505struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
 506        u32 min_interval;
 507        u32 max_interval;
 508};
 509
 510/**
 511 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
 512 *
 513 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
 514 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
 515 *
 516 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
 517 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
 518 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
 519 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
 520 *      ACK, BACK or both
 521 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
 522 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
 523 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
 524 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
 525 *      mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
 526 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
 527 *      mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
 528 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
 529 * @assoc: association status
 530 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
 531 *      or not
 532 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
 533 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
 534 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
 535 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
 536 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
 537 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
 538 *      valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
 539 *      with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
 540 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
 541 *      as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
 542 *      HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
 543 *      only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
 544 *      association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
 545 *      %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
 546 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
 547 *      the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
 548 *      (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
 549 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
 550 *      is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
 551 *      IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
 552 *      by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
 553 *      guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
 554 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
 555 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
 556 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
 557 *      index into the rate table configured by the driver in
 558 *      the current band.
 559 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
 560 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
 561 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
 562 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
 563 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
 564 *      configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
 565 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
 566 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
 567 *      This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
 568 *      Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
 569 *      be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
 570 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
 571 *      implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
 572 *      cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
 573 *      relation to the newly configured threshold.
 574 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
 575 *      implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
 576 *      threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
 577 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
 578 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
 579 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
 580 *      may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
 581 *      The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
 582 *      to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
 583 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
 584 *      may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
 585 *      array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
 586 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
 587 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
 588 *      hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
 589 *      your driver/device needs to do.
 590 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
 591 *      offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
 592 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
 593 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
 594 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
 595 * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
 596 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
 597 *      Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
 598 *      TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
 599 *      NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
 600 *      userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
 601 *      NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
 602 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
 603 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
 604 *      to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
 605 *      if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
 606 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
 607 *      transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
 608 *      In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
 609 *      a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
 610 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
 611 *      protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
 612 *      station.
 613 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
 614 *      responder functionality.
 615 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
 616 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
 617 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
 618 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
 619 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
 620 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
 621 *      nontransmitted BSSIDs
 622 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
 623 *      in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
 624 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
 625 *      connected to (STA)
 626 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
 627 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
 628 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
 629 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
 630 *      interval.
 631 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
 632 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
 633 *      to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
 634 */
 635struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
 636        const u8 *bssid;
 637        u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
 638        bool uora_exists;
 639        u8 uora_ocw_range;
 640        u16 frame_time_rts_th;
 641        bool he_support;
 642        bool twt_requester;
 643        bool twt_responder;
 644        bool twt_protected;
 645        /* association related data */
 646        bool assoc, ibss_joined;
 647        bool ibss_creator;
 648        u16 aid;
 649        /* erp related data */
 650        bool use_cts_prot;
 651        bool use_short_preamble;
 652        bool use_short_slot;
 653        bool enable_beacon;
 654        u8 dtim_period;
 655        u16 beacon_int;
 656        u16 assoc_capability;
 657        u64 sync_tsf;
 658        u32 sync_device_ts;
 659        u8 sync_dtim_count;
 660        u32 basic_rates;
 661        struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
 662        int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
 663        u16 ht_operation_mode;
 664        s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
 665        u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
 666        s32 cqm_rssi_low;
 667        s32 cqm_rssi_high;
 668        struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
 669        struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
 670        __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
 671        int arp_addr_cnt;
 672        bool qos;
 673        bool idle;
 674        bool ps;
 675        u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
 676        size_t ssid_len;
 677        bool hidden_ssid;
 678        int txpower;
 679        enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
 680        struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
 681        bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
 682        u16 max_idle_period;
 683        bool protected_keep_alive;
 684        bool ftm_responder;
 685        struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
 686        /* Multiple BSSID data */
 687        bool nontransmitted;
 688        u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
 689        u8 bssid_index;
 690        u8 bssid_indicator;
 691        bool ema_ap;
 692        u8 profile_periodicity;
 693        struct {
 694                u32 params;
 695                u16 nss_set;
 696        } he_oper;
 697        struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
 698        struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
 699        struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
 700        u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
 701        bool s1g;
 702        struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
 703};
 704
 705/**
 706 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
 707 *
 708 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
 709 *
 710 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
 711 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
 712 *      number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
 713 *      number and increasing the sequence number only when the
 714 *      IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
 715 *      assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
 716 *      for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
 717 *      that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
 718 *      If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
 719 *      assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
 720 *      802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
 721 *      beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
 722 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
 723 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
 724 *      station
 725 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
 726 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
 727 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
 728 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
 729 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
 730 *      because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
 731 *      avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
 732 *      firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
 733 *      went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
 734 *      the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
 735 *      that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
 736 *      since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
 737 *      hardware queue.
 738 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
 739 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
 740 *      is for the whole aggregation.
 741 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
 742 *      so consider using block ack request (BAR).
 743 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
 744 *      set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
 745 *      be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
 746 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
 747 *      that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
 748 *      off-channel operation.
 749 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
 750 *      (header conversion)
 751 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
 752 *      used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
 753 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
 754 *      used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
 755 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
 756 *      frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
 757 *      be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
 758 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
 759 *      transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
 760 *      by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
 761 *      queue gets full.
 762 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
 763 *      after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
 764 *      be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
 765 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
 766 *      code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
 767 *      should kick the MLME state machine.
 768 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
 769 *      MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
 770 *      status to user space)
 771 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
 772 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
 773 *      frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
 774 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
 775 *      the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
 776 *      in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
 777 *      handled properly by the device.
 778 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
 779 *      testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
 780 *      TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
 781 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
 782 *      This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
 783 *      frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
 784 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
 785 *      when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
 786 *      an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
 787 *      the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
 788 *      PS-Poll responses.
 789 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
 790 *      This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
 791 *      the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
 792 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
 793 *      would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
 794 *      monitor injection).
 795 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
 796 *      IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
 797 *      any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
 798 *      This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
 799 *      behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
 800 *
 801 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
 802 *       forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
 803 */
 804enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
 805        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS          = BIT(0),
 806        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ             = BIT(1),
 807        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK                 = BIT(2),
 808        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT          = BIT(3),
 809        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT         = BIT(4),
 810        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM        = BIT(5),
 811        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU                  = BIT(6),
 812        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED               = BIT(7),
 813        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED           = BIT(8),
 814        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK                   = BIT(9),
 815        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU                 = BIT(10),
 816        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK         = BIT(11),
 817        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE        = BIT(12),
 818        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK        = BIT(13),
 819        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP         = BIT(14),
 820        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED              = BIT(15),
 821        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT         = BIT(16),
 822        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER           = BIT(17),
 823        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES            = BIT(18),
 824        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION       = BIT(19),
 825        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX         = BIT(20),
 826        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX     = BIT(21),
 827        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC                   = BIT(22),
 828        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC                   = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
 829        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN             = BIT(25),
 830        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE     = BIT(26),
 831        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE            = BIT(27),
 832        IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP                = BIT(28),
 833        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE            = BIT(29),
 834        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG               = BIT(30),
 835        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED     = BIT(31),
 836};
 837
 838#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT             23
 839
 840#define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
 841
 842/**
 843 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
 844 *
 845 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
 846 *      protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
 847 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
 848 *      frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
 849 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
 850 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
 851 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
 852 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
 853 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
 854 *      used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
 855 *      it can be sent out.
 856 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
 857 *      has already been assigned to this frame.
 858 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
 859 *      relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
 860 *      of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
 861 *
 862 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
 863 */
 864enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
 865        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO       = BIT(0),
 866        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE           = BIT(1),
 867        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT           = BIT(2),
 868        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU                 = BIT(3),
 869        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT             = BIT(4),
 870        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP     = BIT(5),
 871        IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING   = BIT(6),
 872        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO              = BIT(7),
 873        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER          = BIT(8),
 874};
 875
 876/*
 877 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
 878 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
 879 */
 880#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |               \
 881        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
 882        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |           \
 883        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |               \
 884        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |           \
 885        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
 886        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |                \
 887        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
 888
 889/**
 890 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
 891 *      Rate Control algorithm.
 892 *
 893 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
 894 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
 895 *
 896 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
 897 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
 898 *      This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
 899 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
 900 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
 901 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
 902 *      into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
 903 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
 904 *      Greenfield mode.
 905 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
 906 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
 907 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
 908 *      (80+80 isn't supported yet)
 909 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
 910 *      adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
 911 *      NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
 912 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
 913 */
 914enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
 915        IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS             = BIT(0),
 916        IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT         = BIT(1),
 917        IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE      = BIT(2),
 918
 919        /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
 920        IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS                     = BIT(3),
 921        IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD             = BIT(4),
 922        IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH            = BIT(5),
 923        IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA                = BIT(6),
 924        IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI                = BIT(7),
 925        IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS                 = BIT(8),
 926        IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH            = BIT(9),
 927        IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH           = BIT(10),
 928};
 929
 930
 931/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
 932#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
 933
 934/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
 935#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
 936
 937/* maximum number of rate stages */
 938#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES  4
 939
 940/* maximum number of rate table entries */
 941#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE    4
 942
 943/**
 944 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
 945 *
 946 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
 947 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
 948 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
 949 *
 950 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
 951 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
 952 *
 953 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
 954 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
 955 *
 956 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
 957 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
 958 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
 959 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
 960 * information::
 961 *
 962 *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
 963 *
 964 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
 965 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
 966 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
 967 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
 968 * information should then contain::
 969 *
 970 *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
 971 *
 972 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
 973 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
 974 */
 975struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
 976        s8 idx;
 977        u16 count:5,
 978            flags:11;
 979} __packed;
 980
 981#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY          31
 982
 983static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
 984                                          u8 mcs, u8 nss)
 985{
 986        WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
 987        WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
 988        rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
 989}
 990
 991static inline u8
 992ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
 993{
 994        return rate->idx & 0xF;
 995}
 996
 997static inline u8
 998ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
 999{
1000        return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1001}
1002
1003/**
1004 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1005 *
1006 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1007 *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1008 *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1009 *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1010 *
1011 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1012 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
1013 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1014 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1015 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1016 * @control: union part for control data
1017 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1018 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1019 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1020 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1021 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1022 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1023 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1024 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1025 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1026 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1027 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1028 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1029 * @pad: padding
1030 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1031 * @status: union part for status data
1032 * @status.rates: attempted rates
1033 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1034 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1035 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1036 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1037 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1038 *      used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1039 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1040 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1041 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1042 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1043 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1044 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1045 *      relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1046 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1047 *      relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1048 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1049 */
1050struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1051        /* common information */
1052        u32 flags;
1053        u32 band:3,
1054            ack_frame_id:13,
1055            hw_queue:4,
1056            tx_time_est:10;
1057        /* 2 free bits */
1058
1059        union {
1060                struct {
1061                        union {
1062                                /* rate control */
1063                                struct {
1064                                        struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1065                                                IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1066                                        s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1067                                        u8 use_rts:1;
1068                                        u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1069                                        u8 short_preamble:1;
1070                                        u8 skip_table:1;
1071                                        /* 2 bytes free */
1072                                };
1073                                /* only needed before rate control */
1074                                unsigned long jiffies;
1075                        };
1076                        /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1077                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1078                        struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1079                        u32 flags;
1080                        codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1081                } control;
1082                struct {
1083                        u64 cookie;
1084                } ack;
1085                struct {
1086                        struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1087                        s32 ack_signal;
1088                        u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1089                        u8 ampdu_len;
1090                        u8 antenna;
1091                        u16 tx_time;
1092                        bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1093                        void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1094                } status;
1095                struct {
1096                        struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1097                                IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1098                        u8 pad[4];
1099
1100                        void *rate_driver_data[
1101                                IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1102                };
1103                void *driver_data[
1104                        IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1105        };
1106};
1107
1108static inline u16
1109ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1110{
1111        /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1112         * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1113         */
1114        info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1115        return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1116}
1117
1118static inline u16
1119ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1120{
1121        return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1122}
1123
1124/**
1125 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1126 *
1127 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1128 * @info: Basic tx status information
1129 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1130 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1131 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1132 */
1133struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1134        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1135        struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1136        struct sk_buff *skb;
1137        struct rate_info *rate;
1138        struct list_head *free_list;
1139};
1140
1141/**
1142 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1143 *
1144 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1145 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1146 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1147 *
1148 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1149 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1150 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1151 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1152 */
1153struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1154        const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1155        size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1156        const u8 *common_ies;
1157        size_t common_ie_len;
1158};
1159
1160
1161static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1162{
1163        return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1164}
1165
1166static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1167{
1168        return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1169}
1170
1171/**
1172 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1173 *
1174 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1175 *
1176 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1177 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1178 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1179 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1180 *
1181 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1182 *       info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1183 *       instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1184 */
1185static inline void
1186ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1187{
1188        int i;
1189
1190        BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1191                     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1192        BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1193                     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1194        BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1195        /* clear the rate counts */
1196        for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1197                info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1198
1199        BUILD_BUG_ON(
1200            offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1201        memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1202               sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1203               offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1204}
1205
1206
1207/**
1208 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1209 *
1210 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1211 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1212 *      Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1213 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1214 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1215 *      verification has been done by the hardware.
1216 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1217 *      If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1218 *      hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1219 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1220 *      flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1221 *      Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1222 *      is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1223 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1224 *      de-duplication by itself.
1225 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1226 *      the frame.
1227 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1228 *      the frame.
1229 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1230 *      field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1231 *      was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1232 *      merging.
1233 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1234 *      field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1235 *      (including FCS) was received.
1236 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1237 *      field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1238 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1239 *      Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1240 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1241 *      number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1242 *      each A-MPDU
1243 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1244 *      subframes of a single A-MPDU
1245 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1246 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1247 *      on this subframe
1248 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1249 *      is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1250 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1251 *      done by the hardware
1252 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1253 *      processing it in any regular way.
1254 *      This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1255 *      them for sniffing purposes.
1256 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1257 *      monitor interfaces.
1258 *      This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1259 *      them for sniffing purposes.
1260 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1261 *      subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1262 *      All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1263 *      if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1264 *      the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1265 *      deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1266 *      subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1267 *      either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1268 *      interleaved with other frames.
1269 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1270 *      radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1271 *      the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1272 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1273 *      This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1274 *      the first subframe.
1275 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1276 *      be done in the hardware.
1277 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1278 *      frame
1279 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1280 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1281 *      (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1282 *      
1283 *       - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1284 *       - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1285 *       - DATA3_CODING
1286 *       - DATA5_GI
1287 *       - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1288 *       - DATA6_NSTS
1289 *       - DATA3_STBC
1290 *      
1291 *      from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1292 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1293 *      (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1294 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1295 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1296 *      the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1297 *      in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1298 *      known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1299 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1300 *      hardware or driver)
1301 */
1302enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1303        RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR              = BIT(0),
1304        RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED               = BIT(1),
1305        RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START      = BIT(2),
1306        RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED           = BIT(3),
1307        RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED             = BIT(4),
1308        RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC          = BIT(5),
1309        RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC         = BIT(6),
1310        RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START           = BIT(7),
1311        RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL           = BIT(8),
1312        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS           = BIT(9),
1313        RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED            = BIT(10),
1314        RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED           = BIT(11),
1315        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN        = BIT(12),
1316        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST           = BIT(13),
1317        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR   = BIT(14),
1318        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN   = BIT(15),
1319        RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END             = BIT(16),
1320        RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR            = BIT(17),
1321        RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR            = BIT(18),
1322        RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE              = BIT(19),
1323        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA    = BIT(20),
1324        RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED            = BIT(21),
1325        RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN           = BIT(22),
1326        RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED            = BIT(23),
1327        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT           = BIT(24),
1328        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN     = BIT(25),
1329        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE             = BIT(26),
1330        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU          = BIT(27),
1331        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG           = BIT(28),
1332        RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU                 = BIT(29),
1333        RX_FLAG_8023                    = BIT(30),
1334};
1335
1336/**
1337 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1338 *
1339 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1340 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1341 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1342 *      if the driver fills this value it should add
1343 *      %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1344 *      to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1345 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1346 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1347 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1348 */
1349enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1350        RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE            = BIT(0),
1351        RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI            = BIT(2),
1352        RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF               = BIT(3),
1353        RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK           = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1354        RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC                = BIT(6),
1355        RX_ENC_FLAG_BF                  = BIT(7),
1356};
1357
1358#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT          4
1359
1360enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1361        RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1362        RX_ENC_HT,
1363        RX_ENC_VHT,
1364        RX_ENC_HE,
1365};
1366
1367/**
1368 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1369 *
1370 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1371 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1372 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1373 *
1374 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1375 *      (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1376 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1377 *      needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1378 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1379 *      it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1380 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1381 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1382 *      This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1383 *      for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1384 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1385 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1386 *      unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1387 *      @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1388 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1389 *      values were filled.
1390 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1391 *      support dB or unspecified units)
1392 * @antenna: antenna used
1393 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1394 *      HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1395 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1396 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1397 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1398 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1399 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1400 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1401 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1402 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1403 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1404 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1405 *      each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1406 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1407 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1408 */
1409struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1410        u64 mactime;
1411        u64 boottime_ns;
1412        u32 device_timestamp;
1413        u32 ampdu_reference;
1414        u32 flag;
1415        u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1416        u8 enc_flags;
1417        u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1418        u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1419        u8 rate_idx;
1420        u8 nss;
1421        u8 rx_flags;
1422        u8 band;
1423        u8 antenna;
1424        s8 signal;
1425        u8 chains;
1426        s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1427        u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1428        u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1429};
1430
1431static inline u32
1432ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1433{
1434        return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1435               (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1436}
1437
1438/**
1439 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1440 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1441 *      (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1442 *       bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1443 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1444 *      alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1445 *      description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1446 *      Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1447 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1448 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1449 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1450 *      then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1451 *      @data field.
1452 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1453 *      the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1454 *      length
1455 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1456 *
1457 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1458 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1459 * data.
1460 */
1461struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1462        u32 present;
1463        u8 align;
1464        u8 oui[3];
1465        u8 subns;
1466        u8 pad;
1467        u16 len;
1468        u8 data[];
1469} __packed;
1470
1471/**
1472 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1473 *
1474 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1475 *
1476 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1477 *      to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1478 *      or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1479 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1480 *      This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1481 *      meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1482 *      transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1483 *      Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1484 *      driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1485 *      for more.
1486 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1487 *      the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1488 *      may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1489 *      be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1490 *      it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1491 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1492 *      operating channel.
1493 */
1494enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1495        IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR          = (1<<0),
1496        IEEE80211_CONF_PS               = (1<<1),
1497        IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE             = (1<<2),
1498        IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL       = (1<<3),
1499};
1500
1501
1502/**
1503 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1504 *
1505 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1506 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1507 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1508 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1509 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1510 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1511 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1512 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1513 *      Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1514 *      otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1515 */
1516enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1517        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS              = BIT(1),
1518        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL   = BIT(2),
1519        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR           = BIT(3),
1520        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS                = BIT(4),
1521        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER             = BIT(5),
1522        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL           = BIT(6),
1523        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS      = BIT(7),
1524        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE              = BIT(8),
1525};
1526
1527/**
1528 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1529 *
1530 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1531 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1532 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1533 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1534 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1535 */
1536enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1537        IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1538        IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1539        IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1540        IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1541
1542        /* keep last */
1543        IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1544};
1545
1546/**
1547 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1548 *
1549 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1550 *
1551 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1552 *
1553 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1554 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1555 *      in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1556 *      has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1557 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1558 *      powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1559 *      the CONF_PS flag is set.
1560 *
1561 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1562 *      value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1563 *
1564 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1565 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1566 *
1567 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1568 *      (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1569 *      but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1570 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1571 *      frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1572 *      number of transmissions not the number of retries
1573 *
1574 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1575 *      %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1576 *      configured for an HT channel.
1577 *      Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1578 *      otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1579 */
1580struct ieee80211_conf {
1581        u32 flags;
1582        int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1583
1584        u16 listen_interval;
1585        u8 ps_dtim_period;
1586
1587        u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1588
1589        struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1590        bool radar_enabled;
1591        enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1592};
1593
1594/**
1595 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1596 *
1597 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1598 * operation.
1599 *
1600 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1601 *      Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1602 *      announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1603 *      the driver passed into mac80211.
1604 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1605 *      rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1606 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1607 *      scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1608 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1609 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1610 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1611  *     current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1612  *     channel, expressed in TU.
1613 */
1614struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1615        u64 timestamp;
1616        u32 device_timestamp;
1617        bool block_tx;
1618        struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1619        u8 count;
1620        u32 delay;
1621};
1622
1623/**
1624 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1625 *
1626 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1627 *      on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1628 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1629 *      monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1630 *      connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1631 *      provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1632 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1633 *      interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1634 *      but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1635 *      only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1636 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1637 *      and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1638 *      this is not pure P2P vif.
1639 */
1640enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1641        IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER             = BIT(0),
1642        IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI         = BIT(1),
1643        IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD            = BIT(2),
1644        IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE            = BIT(3),
1645};
1646
1647
1648/**
1649 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1650 *
1651 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1652 *      The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1653 *      It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1654 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1655 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1656 *      The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1657 *      mac80211.
1658 */
1659
1660enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1661        IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED         = BIT(0),
1662        IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR           = BIT(1),
1663        IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED         = BIT(2),
1664};
1665
1666/**
1667 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1668 *
1669 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1670 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1671 *
1672 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1673 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1674 *      or the BSS we're associated to
1675 * @addr: address of this interface
1676 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1677 *      interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1678 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1679 *      write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1680 *      for read access.
1681 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1682 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1683 *      these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1684 *      or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1685 *      at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1686 * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1687 *      These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1688 *      .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1689 *      within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1690 *      restrictions.
1691 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1692 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1693 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1694 *      when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1695 *      path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1696 *      be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1697 *      processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1698 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1699 *      interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1700 *      monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1701 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1702 *      interface.
1703 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1704 *      for this interface.
1705 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1706 *      sizeof(void \*).
1707 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1708 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1709 *      protected by fq->lock.
1710 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1711 *      &enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1712 */
1713struct ieee80211_vif {
1714        enum nl80211_iftype type;
1715        struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1716        u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1717        bool p2p;
1718        bool csa_active;
1719        bool mu_mimo_owner;
1720
1721        u8 cab_queue;
1722        u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1723
1724        struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1725
1726        struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1727
1728        u32 driver_flags;
1729        u32 offload_flags;
1730
1731#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1732        struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1733#endif
1734
1735        bool probe_req_reg;
1736        bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1737
1738        bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1739
1740        /* must be last */
1741        u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1742};
1743
1744static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1745{
1746#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1747        return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1748#endif
1749        return false;
1750}
1751
1752/**
1753 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1754 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1755 *
1756 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1757 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1758 *
1759 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1760 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1761 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1762 */
1763struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1764
1765/**
1766 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1767 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1768 *
1769 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1770 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1771 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
1772 */
1773struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1774
1775/**
1776 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1777 *
1778 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1779 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1780 *
1781 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1782 *      driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1783 *      particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1784 *      will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1785 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1786 *      the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1787 *      generation in software.
1788 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1789 *      that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1790 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1791 *      CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1792 *      (MFP) to be done in software.
1793 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1794 *      if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1795 *      itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1796 *      @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1797 *      not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1798 *      MIC.
1799 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1800 *      management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1801 *      crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1802 *      properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1803 *      fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1804 *      RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1805 *      %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1806 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1807 *      driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1808 *      only for management frames (MFP).
1809 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1810 *      driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1811 *      be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1812 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1813 *      a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1814 *      @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1815 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1816 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1817 *      for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1818 *      generation only
1819 */
1820enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1821        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT     = BIT(0),
1822        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV          = BIT(1),
1823        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC        = BIT(2),
1824        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE             = BIT(3),
1825        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX           = BIT(4),
1826        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE         = BIT(5),
1827        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT              = BIT(6),
1828        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM     = BIT(7),
1829        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE        = BIT(8),
1830        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX           = BIT(9),
1831        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE        = BIT(10),
1832};
1833
1834/**
1835 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1836 *
1837 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1838 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1839 *
1840 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1841 *      wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1842 *      encrypted in hardware.
1843 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1844 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1845 *      needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1846 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1847 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1848 * @keylen: key material length
1849 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1850 *      data block:
1851 *      - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1852 *      - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1853 *      - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1854 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1855 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1856 */
1857struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1858        atomic64_t tx_pn;
1859        u32 cipher;
1860        u8 icv_len;
1861        u8 iv_len;
1862        u8 hw_key_idx;
1863        s8 keyidx;
1864        u16 flags;
1865        u8 keylen;
1866        u8 key[];
1867};
1868
1869#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN    16
1870
1871#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1872#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1873
1874/**
1875 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1876 *
1877 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1878 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1879 *      reverse order than in packet)
1880 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1881 *      reverse order than in packet)
1882 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1883 *      reverse order than in packet)
1884 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1885 *      reverse order than in packet)
1886 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1887 */
1888struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1889        union {
1890                struct {
1891                        u32 iv32;
1892                        u16 iv16;
1893                } tkip;
1894                struct {
1895                        u8 pn[6];
1896                } ccmp;
1897                struct {
1898                        u8 pn[6];
1899                } aes_cmac;
1900                struct {
1901                        u8 pn[6];
1902                } aes_gmac;
1903                struct {
1904                        u8 pn[6];
1905                } gcmp;
1906                struct {
1907                        u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1908                        u8 seq_len;
1909                } hw;
1910        };
1911};
1912
1913/**
1914 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1915 *
1916 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1917 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1918 *
1919 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1920 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1921 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1922 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1923 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1924 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1925 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1926 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1927 *     key_idx value calculation:
1928 *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1929 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1930 */
1931struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1932        u32 cipher;
1933        u16 iftype;
1934        u8 hdr_len;
1935        u8 pn_len;
1936        u8 pn_off;
1937        u8 key_idx_off;
1938        u8 key_idx_mask;
1939        u8 key_idx_shift;
1940        u8 mic_len;
1941};
1942
1943/**
1944 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1945 *
1946 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1947 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1948 *
1949 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1950 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1951 */
1952enum set_key_cmd {
1953        SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1954};
1955
1956/**
1957 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1958 *
1959 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1960 *      this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1961 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1962 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1963 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1964 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1965 */
1966enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1967        /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1968        IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1969        IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1970        IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1971        IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1972        IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1973};
1974
1975/**
1976 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1977 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1978 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1979 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1980 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1981 *      (including 80+80 MHz)
1982 *
1983 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1984 *      correctly, the values must be sorted.
1985 */
1986enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1987        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1988        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1989        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1990        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1991};
1992
1993/**
1994 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1995 *
1996 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1997 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1998 *      Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1999 */
2000struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2001        struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2002        struct {
2003                s8 idx;
2004                u8 count;
2005                u8 count_cts;
2006                u8 count_rts;
2007                u16 flags;
2008        } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2009};
2010
2011/**
2012 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2013 *
2014 * Used to configure txpower for station.
2015 *
2016 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2017 *      to the STA.
2018 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2019 *      will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2020 *      %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2021 *      NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2022 *      per peer TPC.
2023 */
2024struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2025        s16 power;
2026        enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2027};
2028
2029/**
2030 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2031 *
2032 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2033 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2034 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2035 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2036 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2037 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2038 *
2039 * @addr: MAC address
2040 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2041 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
2042 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2043 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2044 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2045 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2046 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2047 *      that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2048 *      Can be modified by driver.
2049 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2050 *      otherwise always false)
2051 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2052 *      sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2053 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2054 *      if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2055 *      IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2056 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2057 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2058 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2059 *      station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2060 *      notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2061 *      the station moves to associated state.
2062 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2063 * @rates: rate control selection table
2064 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2065 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2066 *      valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2067 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2068 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2069 *      A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2070 *      unlimited.
2071 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2072 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2073 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2074 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2075 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2076 *      the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2077 */
2078struct ieee80211_sta {
2079        u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2080        u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2081        u16 aid;
2082        struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2083        struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2084        struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2085        struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2086        u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2087        bool wme;
2088        u8 uapsd_queues;
2089        u8 max_sp;
2090        u8 rx_nss;
2091        enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2092        enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2093        struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2094        bool tdls;
2095        bool tdls_initiator;
2096        bool mfp;
2097        u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2098
2099        /**
2100         * @max_amsdu_len:
2101         * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2102         * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2103         * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2104         *
2105         * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2106         *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2107         * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2108         *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2109         *
2110         * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2111         * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2112         * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2113         */
2114        u16 max_amsdu_len;
2115        bool support_p2p_ps;
2116        u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2117        u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2118        struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2119
2120        struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2121
2122        /* must be last */
2123        u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2124};
2125
2126/**
2127 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2128 *
2129 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2130 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2131 *
2132 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2133 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2134 */
2135enum sta_notify_cmd {
2136        STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2137};
2138
2139/**
2140 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2141 *
2142 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2143 *      it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2144 */
2145struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2146        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2147};
2148
2149/**
2150 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2151 *
2152 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2153 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2154 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2155 *      %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2156 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2157 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2158 *
2159 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2160 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2161 */
2162struct ieee80211_txq {
2163        struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2164        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2165        u8 tid;
2166        u8 ac;
2167
2168        /* must be last */
2169        u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2170};
2171
2172/**
2173 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2174 *
2175 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2176 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2177 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2178 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2179 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2180 *
2181 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2182 *      The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2183 *      controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2184 *      should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2185 *      will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2186 *      algorithm.
2187 *      Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2188 *      callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2189 *      the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2190 *      @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2191 *      timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2192 *      CCK frames.
2193 *
2194 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2195 *      Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2196 *      the FCS at the end.
2197 *
2198 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2199 *      Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2200 *      for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2201 *      rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2202 *      to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2203 *      multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2204 *      the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2205 *
2206 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2207 *      Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2208 *      expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2209 *      If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2210 *
2211 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2212 *      Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2213 *      one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2214 *      between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2215 *
2216 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2217 *      Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2218 *      Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2219 *
2220 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2221 *      Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2222 *
2223 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2224 *      Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2225 *
2226 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2227 *      Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2228 *      stack support for dynamic PS.
2229 *
2230 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2231 *      Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2232 *
2233 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2234 *      Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2235 *
2236 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2237 *      Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2238 *      the stack.
2239 *
2240 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2241 *      The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2242 *      periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2243 *
2244 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2245 *      This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2246 *      dtim_period).
2247 *
2248 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2249 *      per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2250 *      the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2251 *      to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2252 *      possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2253 *      only in that case.
2254 *
2255 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2256 *      autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2257 *      this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2258 *      stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2259 *      Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2260 *      the PS mode of connected stations.
2261 *
2262 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2263 *      setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2264 *      software.
2265 *
2266 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2267 *      a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2268 *      active interfaces.
2269 *
2270 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2271 *      be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2272 *      desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2273 *
2274 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2275 *      crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2276 *      try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2277 *      the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2278 *      supported cipher suites.
2279 *
2280 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2281 *      this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2282 *      for frames.
2283 *
2284 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2285 *      queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2286 *      for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2287 *      control for more details.
2288 *
2289 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2290 *      selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2291 *
2292 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2293 *      P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2294 *      is supported.
2295 *
2296 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2297 *      only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2298 *
2299 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2300 *      and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2301 *      using aggregation for such frames.)
2302 *
2303 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2304 *      for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2305 *      is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2306 *      CSA frame.
2307 *
2308 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2309 *      or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2310 *
2311 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2312 *      in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2313 *
2314 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2315 *      than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2316 *
2317 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2318 *      within A-MPDU.
2319 *
2320 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2321 *      for sent beacons.
2322 *
2323 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2324 *      station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2325 *      by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2326 *      from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2327 *
2328 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2329 *      reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2330 *      order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2331 *      timeout.
2332 *
2333 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2334 *      which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2335 *
2336 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2337 *      A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2338 *      When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2339 *      limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2340 *      max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2341 *
2342 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2343 *      skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2344 *
2345 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2346 *      by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2347 *      drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2348 *      is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2349 *
2350 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2351 *      The stack will not do fragmentation.
2352 *      The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2353 *
2354 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2355 *      TDLS links.
2356 *
2357 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2358 *      mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2359 *      deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2360 *      beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2361 *      virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2362 *      the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2363 *      deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2364 *
2365 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2366 *      support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2367 *
2368 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2369 *      course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2370 *
2371 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2372 *      extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2373 *      the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2374 *      but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2375 *      See also the documentation for that flag.
2376 *
2377 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2378 *      MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2379 *      TXQs to start with.
2380 *
2381 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2382 *      length in tx status information
2383 *
2384 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2385 *
2386 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2387 *      only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2388 *
2389 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2390 *      aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2391 *      A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2392 *
2393 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2394 *      offload
2395 *
2396 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2397 *      offload
2398 *
2399 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
2400 *      decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
2401 *      If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
2402 *      usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
2403 *      the stack.
2404 *
2405 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2406 */
2407enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2408        IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2409        IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2410        IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2411        IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2412        IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2413        IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2414        IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2415        IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2416        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2417        IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2418        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2419        IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2420        IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2421        IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2422        IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2423        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2424        IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2425        IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2426        IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2427        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2428        IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2429        IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2430        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2431        IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2432        IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2433        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2434        IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2435        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2436        IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2437        IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2438        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2439        IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2440        IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2441        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2442        IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2443        IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2444        IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2445        IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2446        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2447        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2448        IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2449        IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2450        IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2451        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2452        IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2453        IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2454        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2455        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2456        IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2457        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2458        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2459        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
2460
2461        /* keep last, obviously */
2462        NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2463};
2464
2465/**
2466 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2467 *
2468 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2469 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2470 *
2471 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2472 *      802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2473 *      members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2474 *      and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2475 *      bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2476 *
2477 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2478 *
2479 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2480 *      along with this structure.
2481 *
2482 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2483 *
2484 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2485 *      for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2486 *
2487 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2488 *      Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2489 *
2490 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2491 *      only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2492 *
2493 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2494 *      that HW supports
2495 *
2496 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2497 *      data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2498 *      queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2499 *
2500 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2501 *      If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2502 *      set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2503 *
2504 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2505 *      within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2506 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2507 *      within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2508 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2509 *      within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2510 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2511 *      within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2512 *
2513 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2514 *      can handle.
2515 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2516 *      the hw can report back.
2517 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2518 *
2519 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2520 *      sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2521 *      aggregation.
2522 *      This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2523 *      number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2524 *      it shouldn't be set.
2525 *
2526 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2527 *      aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2528 *      advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2529 *      the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2530 *      with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2531 *      For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2532 *
2533 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2534 *      of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2535 *
2536 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2537 *      (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2538 *
2539 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2540 *      reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2541 *      include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2542 *      adding _BW is supported today.
2543 *
2544 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2545 *      the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2546 *      Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2547 *
2548 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2549 *
2550 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2551 *      @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2552 *      field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2553 *      device_timestamp.
2554 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2555 *      IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2556 *      IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2557 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2558 *      radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2559 *
2560 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2561 *      from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2562 *      other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2563 *
2564 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2565 *      for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2566 *      enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2567 *      Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2568 *      that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2569 *      neither enabled.
2570 *
2571 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2572 *      deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2573 *      Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2574 *
2575 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2576 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2577 *      supported by HW.
2578 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2579 *      device.
2580 *
2581 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2582 *      them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2583 *      unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2584 *
2585 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2586 *      refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2587 *
2588 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2589 */
2590struct ieee80211_hw {
2591        struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2592        struct wiphy *wiphy;
2593        const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2594        void *priv;
2595        unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2596        unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2597        unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2598        int vif_data_size;
2599        int sta_data_size;
2600        int chanctx_data_size;
2601        int txq_data_size;
2602        u16 queues;
2603        u16 max_listen_interval;
2604        s8 max_signal;
2605        u8 max_rates;
2606        u8 max_report_rates;
2607        u8 max_rate_tries;
2608        u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2609        u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2610        u8 max_tx_fragments;
2611        u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2612        u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2613        u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2614        struct {
2615                int units_pos;
2616                s16 accuracy;
2617        } radiotap_timestamp;
2618        netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2619        u8 uapsd_queues;
2620        u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2621        u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2622        const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2623        u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2624        u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2625        u8 weight_multiplier;
2626        u32 max_mtu;
2627};
2628
2629static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2630                                       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2631{
2632        return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2633}
2634#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)     _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2635
2636static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2637                                     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2638{
2639        return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2640}
2641#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)       _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2642
2643/**
2644 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2645 *
2646 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2647 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2648 */
2649struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2650        struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2651
2652        /* Keep last */
2653        struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2654};
2655
2656/**
2657 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2658 *
2659 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2660 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2661 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2662 * @status: channel-switch response status
2663 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2664 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2665 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2666 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2667 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2668 */
2669struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2670        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2671        struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2672        u8 action_code;
2673        u32 status;
2674        u32 timestamp;
2675        u16 switch_time;
2676        u16 switch_timeout;
2677        struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2678        u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2679};
2680
2681/**
2682 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2683 *
2684 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2685 *
2686 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2687 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2688 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2689 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2690 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2691 *
2692 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2693 */
2694struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2695
2696/**
2697 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2698 *
2699 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2700 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2701 */
2702static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2703{
2704        set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2705}
2706
2707/**
2708 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2709 *
2710 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2711 * @addr: the address to set
2712 */
2713static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2714{
2715        memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2716}
2717
2718static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2719ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2720                      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2721{
2722        if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2723                return NULL;
2724        return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2725}
2726
2727static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2728ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2729                           const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2730{
2731        if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2732                return NULL;
2733        return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2734}
2735
2736static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2737ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2738                             const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2739{
2740        if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2741                return NULL;
2742        return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2743}
2744
2745/**
2746 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2747 * @hw: the hardware
2748 * @skb: the skb
2749 *
2750 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2751 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2752 */
2753void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2754
2755/**
2756 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2757 *
2758 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2759 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2760 *
2761 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2762 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2763 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2764 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2765 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2766 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2767 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2768 *
2769 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2770 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2771 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2772 *
2773 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2774 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2775 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2776 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2777 *
2778 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2779 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2780 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2781 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2782 *
2783 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2784 *
2785 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2786 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2787 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2788 * based on the receive flags.
2789 *
2790 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2791 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2792 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2793 * keys.
2794 *
2795 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2796 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2797 * handler.
2798 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2799 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2800 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2801 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2802 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2803 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2804 *
2805 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2806 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2807 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2808 *
2809 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2810 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
2811 * requirements:
2812 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2813      mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2814      completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2815   2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2816      at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2817   3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2818      encrypted with the new key and
2819   4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2820   Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2821 */
2822
2823/**
2824 * DOC: Powersave support
2825 *
2826 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2827 *
2828 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2829 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2830 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2831 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2832 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2833 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2834 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2835 * it finds traffic directed to it.
2836 *
2837 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2838 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2839 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2840 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2841 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2842 *
2843 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2844 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2845 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2846 *
2847 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2848 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2849 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2850 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2851 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2852 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2853 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2854 *
2855 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2856 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2857 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2858 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2859 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2860 * periods.
2861 *
2862 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2863 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2864 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2865 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2866 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2867 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2868 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2869 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2870 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2871 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2872 *
2873 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2874 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2875 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2876 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2877 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2878 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2879 *
2880 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2881 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2882 */
2883
2884/**
2885 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2886 *
2887 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2888 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2889 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2890 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2891 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2892 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2893 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2894 *
2895 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2896 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2897 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2898 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2899 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2900 *
2901 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2902 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2903 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2904 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2905 *
2906 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2907 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2908 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2909 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2910 *
2911 *  - a list of information element IDs
2912 *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2913 *
2914 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2915 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2916 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2917 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2918 * vendor information elements.
2919 *
2920 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2921 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2922 *
2923 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2924 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2925 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2926 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2927 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2928 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2929 *
2930 *
2931 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2932 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2933 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2934 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2935 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2936 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2937 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2938 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2939 *
2940 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2941 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2942 * signal strength threshold checking.
2943 */
2944
2945/**
2946 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2947 *
2948 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2949 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2950 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2951 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2952 *
2953 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2954 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2955 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2956 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2957 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2958 * hardware flags.
2959 *
2960 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2961 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2962 * turned off otherwise.
2963 *
2964 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2965 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2966 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2967 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2968 */
2969
2970/**
2971 * DOC: Frame filtering
2972 *
2973 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2974 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2975 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2976 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2977 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2978 *
2979 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2980 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2981 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2982 *
2983 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2984 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2985 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2986 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2987 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2988 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2989 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2990 *
2991 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2992 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2993 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2994 * or dropped.
2995 *
2996 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2997 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2998 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2999 * the flag, but not clear it.
3000 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
3001 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
3002 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
3003 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3004 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3005 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3006 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3007 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3008 */
3009
3010/**
3011 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3012 *
3013 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3014 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3015 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3016 *
3017 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3018 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3019 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3020 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3021 * the driver code.
3022 *
3023 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3024 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3025 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3026 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3027 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3028 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3029 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3030 *
3031 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3032 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3033 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3034 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3035 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3036 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3037 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3038 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3039 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3040 * @sta_notify callback.
3041 *
3042 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3043 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3044 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3045 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3046 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3047 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3048 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3049 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3050 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3051 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3052 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3053 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3054 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3055 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3056 *
3057 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3058 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3059 *
3060 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3061 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3062 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3063 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3064 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3065 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3066 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3067 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3068 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3069 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3070 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3071 *
3072 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3073 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3074 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3075 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3076 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3077 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3078 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3079 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3080 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3081 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3082 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3083 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3084 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3085 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3086 *
3087 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3088 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3089 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3090 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3091 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3092 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3093 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3094 *
3095 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3096 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3097 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3098 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3099 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3100 *
3101 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3102 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3103 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3104 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3105 */
3106
3107/**
3108 * DOC: HW queue control
3109 *
3110 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3111 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3112 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3113 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3114 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3115 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3116 *
3117 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3118 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3119 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3120 *
3121 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3122 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3123 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3124 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3125 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3126 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3127 * the hardware queue.
3128 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3129 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3130 *
3131 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3132 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3133 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3134 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3135 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3136 *
3137 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3138 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3139 * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3140 * off-channel queue:         9
3141 *
3142 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3143 *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3144 *
3145 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3146 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3147 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3148 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3149 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3150 *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3151 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3152 *
3153 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3154 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3155 *
3156 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3157 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3158 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3159 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3160 */
3161
3162/**
3163 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3164 *
3165 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3166 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3167 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3168 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3169 *
3170 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3171 *      by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3172 *      multicast address.
3173 *
3174 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3175 *      %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3176 *
3177 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3178 *      the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3179 *
3180 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3181 *      to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3182 *      by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3183 *      mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3184 *      honour this flag if possible.
3185 *
3186 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3187 *      station
3188 *
3189 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3190 *
3191 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3192 *
3193 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3194 *
3195 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3196 */
3197enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3198        FIF_ALLMULTI            = 1<<1,
3199        FIF_FCSFAIL             = 1<<2,
3200        FIF_PLCPFAIL            = 1<<3,
3201        FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3202        FIF_CONTROL             = 1<<5,
3203        FIF_OTHER_BSS           = 1<<6,
3204        FIF_PSPOLL              = 1<<7,
3205        FIF_PROBE_REQ           = 1<<8,
3206        FIF_MCAST_ACTION        = 1<<9,
3207};
3208
3209/**
3210 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3211 *
3212 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3213 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3214 *
3215 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3216 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3217 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3218 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3219 *
3220 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3221 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3222 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3223 *      call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3224 *      call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3225 *      %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3226 *      ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3227 *      status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3228 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3229 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3230 *      queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3231 *      driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3232 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3233 *      called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3234 *      ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3235 *      session is gone and removes the station.
3236 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3237 *      but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3238 *      now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3239 *      should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3240 */
3241enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3242        IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3243        IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3244        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3245        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3246        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3247        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3248        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3249};
3250
3251#define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3252#define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3253
3254/**
3255 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3256 *
3257 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3258 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3259 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3260 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3261 *      action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3262 *      actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3263 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3264 *      action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3265 *      %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3266 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3267 *      valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3268 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3269 *      %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3270 */
3271struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3272        enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3273        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3274        u16 tid;
3275        u16 ssn;
3276        u16 buf_size;
3277        bool amsdu;
3278        u16 timeout;
3279};
3280
3281/**
3282 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3283 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3284 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3285 *      frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3286 */
3287enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3288        IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3289        IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3290};
3291
3292/**
3293 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3294 *
3295 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3296 *      to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3297 *      information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3298 *      flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3299 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3300 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3301 *      changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3302 *      the peer.
3303 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3304 *      by the peer
3305 */
3306enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3307        IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED         = BIT(0),
3308        IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED       = BIT(1),
3309        IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3310        IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED        = BIT(3),
3311};
3312
3313/**
3314 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3315 *
3316 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3317 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3318 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3319 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3320 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3321 *
3322 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3323 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3324 *      for sending management frames offchannel.
3325 */
3326enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3327        IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3328        IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3329};
3330
3331/**
3332 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3333 *
3334 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3335 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3336 *
3337 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3338 *      (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3339 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3340 *      of wowlan configuration)
3341 */
3342enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3343        IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3344        IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3345};
3346
3347/**
3348 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3349 *
3350 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3351 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3352 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3353 *
3354 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3355 *      skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3356 *      The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3357 *      configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3358 *      preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3359 *      Must be atomic.
3360 *
3361 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3362 *      is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3363 *      frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3364 *      Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3365 *      or zero.
3366 *      When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3367 *      to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3368 *      is added.
3369 *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3370 *
3371 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3372 *      is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3373 *      it must turn off frame reception.)
3374 *      May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3375 *      an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3376 *      you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3377 *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3378 *
3379 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3380 *      stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3381 *      ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3382 *      configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3383 *      reconfigured at resume time.
3384 *      The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3385 *      wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3386 *      supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3387 *      must return 1 from this function.
3388 *
3389 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3390 *      now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3391 *      functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3392 *      to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3393 *      will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3394 *
3395 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3396 *      modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3397 *      supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3398 *      in suspend().
3399 *
3400 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3401 *      enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3402 *      and @stop must be implemented.
3403 *      The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3404 *      the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3405 *      interface is given in the conf parameter.
3406 *      The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3407 *      negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3408 *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3409 *
3410 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3411 *      is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3412 *      switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3413 *      Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3414 *      found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3415 *
3416 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3417 *      The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3418 *      and no monitor interfaces are present.
3419 *      When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3420 *      must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3421 *      the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3422 *      MAC address of the device going away.
3423 *      Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3424 *
3425 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3426 *      function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3427 *      This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3428 *      if it does. The callback can sleep.
3429 *
3430 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3431 *      parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3432 *      level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3433 *      This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3434 *      for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3435 *      of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3436 *      can sleep.
3437 *
3438 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3439 *      This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3440 *      to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3441 *
3442 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3443 *      See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3444 *      This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3445 *
3446 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3447 *      This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3448 *      should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3449 *      of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3450 *      which flags are changed.
3451 *      This callback can sleep.
3452 *
3453 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3454 *      must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3455 *
3456 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3457 *      This callback is only called between add_interface and
3458 *      remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3459 *      is enabled.
3460 *      Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3461 *      The callback can sleep.
3462 *
3463 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3464 *      This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3465 *      which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3466 *      The callback must be atomic.
3467 *
3468 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3469 *      host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3470 *      necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3471 *      After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3472 *      userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3473 *
3474 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3475 *      WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3476 *      offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3477 *
3478 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3479 *      the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3480 *      configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3481 *      registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3482 *      that power save is disabled.
3483 *      The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3484 *      entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3485 *      at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3486 *      (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3487 *      When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3488 *      note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3489 *      any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3490 *      This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3491 *      this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3492 *      software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3493 *      capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3494 *      advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3495 *      The callback can sleep.
3496 *
3497 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3498 *      The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3499 *      but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3500 *      ieee80211_scan_completed().
3501 *      This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3502 *      scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3503 *      The callback can sleep.
3504 *
3505 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3506 *      specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3507 *      ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3508 *      This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3509 *
3510 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3511 *      In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3512 *
3513 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3514 *      is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3515 *      The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3516 *      the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3517 *      can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3518 *
3519 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3520 *      software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3521 *      this notification.
3522 *      The callback can sleep.
3523 *
3524 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3525 *      Returns zero if statistics are available.
3526 *      The callback can sleep.
3527 *
3528 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3529 *      IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3530 *      IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3531 *      The callback must be atomic.
3532 *
3533 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3534 *      if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3535 *      stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3536 *      should be set as well.
3537 *      The callback can sleep.
3538 *
3539 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3540 *      The callback can sleep.
3541 *
3542 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3543 *      AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3544 *
3545 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3546 *      station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3547 *      returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3548 *      no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3549 *      the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3550 *      This callback can sleep.
3551 *
3552 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3553 *      when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3554 *      should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3555 *      callback can sleep.
3556 *
3557 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3558 *      associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3559 *      in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3560 *      %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3561 *
3562 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3563 *      power for the station.
3564 *      This callback can sleep.
3565 *
3566 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3567 *      station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3568 *      This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3569 *      It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3570 *      up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3571 *      isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3572 *      period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3573 *      See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3574 *      The callback can sleep.
3575 *
3576 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3577 *      synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3578 *      pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3579 *      the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3580 *      in @sta_state.
3581 *      The callback can sleep.
3582 *
3583 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3584 *      used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3585 *      from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3586 *      in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3587 *      uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3588 *      otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3589 *      Must be atomic.
3590 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3591 *      is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3592 *      the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3593 *
3594 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3595 *      filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3596 *      let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3597 *      the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3598 *      all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3599 *      Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3600 *      The callback can sleep.
3601 *
3602 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3603 *      bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3604 *      Returns a negative error code on failure.
3605 *      The callback can sleep.
3606 *
3607 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3608 *      this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3609 *      required function.
3610 *      The callback can sleep.
3611 *
3612 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3613 *      Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3614 *      required function.
3615 *      The callback can sleep.
3616 *
3617 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3618 *      firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3619 *      calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3620 *      as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3621 *      The callback can sleep.
3622 *
3623 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3624 *      with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3625 *      function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3626 *      TSF synchronization.
3627 *      The callback can sleep.
3628 *
3629 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3630 *      This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3631 *      used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3632 *      Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3633 *      The callback can sleep.
3634 *
3635 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3636 *
3637 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3638 *      need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3639 *      and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3640 *      The callback can sleep.
3641 *
3642 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3643 *      in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3644 *      accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3645 *      estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3646 *      coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3647 *
3648 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3649 *      be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3650 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3651 *
3652 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3653 *      that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3654 *      of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3655 *      use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3656 *      If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3657 *      Note that vif can be NULL.
3658 *      The callback can sleep.
3659 *
3660 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3661 *      switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3662 *      callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3663 *      completion of the channel switch.
3664 *
3665 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3666 *      Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3667 *      reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3668 *      (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3669 *
3670 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3671 *
3672 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3673 *      call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3674 *      that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3675 *      offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3676 *      normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3677 *      duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3678 *      ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3679 *      Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3680 *      must be accepted in this case.
3681 *      This callback may sleep.
3682 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3683 *      aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3684 *
3685 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3686 *
3687 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3688 *
3689 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3690 *      queues before entering power save.
3691 *
3692 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3693 *      when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3694 *      The callback can sleep.
3695 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3696 *      &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3697 *      The callback must be atomic.
3698 *
3699 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3700 *      parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3701 *      sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3702 *      to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3703 *      Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3704 *      if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3705 *      the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3706 *      the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3707 *      more-data bit must always be set.
3708 *      The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3709 *      from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3710 *      In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3711 *      @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3712 *      this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3713 *      on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3714 *      period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3715 *      responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3716 *      In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3717 *      bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3718 *      at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3719 *      setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3720 *      service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3721 *      on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3722 *      ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3723 *      This callback must be atomic.
3724 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3725 *      to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3726 *      via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3727 *      released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3728 *      and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3729 *      frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3730 *      them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3731 *      on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3732 *      bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3733 *      ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3734 *      The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3735 *      frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3736 *      This callback must be atomic.
3737 *
3738 * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3739 *
3740 * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3741 *
3742 * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3743 *      and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3744 *
3745 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3746 *      before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3747 *      bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3748 *      yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3749 *      transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3750 *      powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3751 *      management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3752 *      driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3753 *      and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3754 *      For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3755 *      would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3756 *      frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3757 *      The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3758 *      mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3759 *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3760 *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3761 *      The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3762 *
3763 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3764 *      a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3765 *      channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3766 *      setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3767 *      mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3768 *      discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3769 *      2 * (DTIM period).
3770 *      The callback is optional and can sleep.
3771 *
3772 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3773 *      This callback may sleep.
3774 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3775 *      This callback may sleep.
3776 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3777 *      may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3778 *      channel context with different settings
3779 *      This callback may sleep.
3780 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3781 *      to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3782 *      This callback may sleep.
3783 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3784 *      unbound from vif.
3785 *      This callback may sleep.
3786 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3787 *      another, as specified in the list of
3788 *      @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3789 *      to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3790 *      This callback may sleep.
3791 *
3792 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3793 *      information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3794 *      context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3795 *      software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3796 *      just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3797 *      disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3798 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3799 *
3800 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3801 *      during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3802 *      This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3803 *      indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3804 *      This callback may sleep.
3805 *
3806 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3807 *      Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3808 *      This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3809 *
3810 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3811 *      Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3812 *      function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3813 *      decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3814 *      ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3815 *      get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3816 *      1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3817 *      transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3818 *      If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3819 *      since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3820 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3821 *      before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3822 *      gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3823 *      the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3824 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3825 *      after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3826 *      driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3827 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3828 *      when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3829 *      driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3830 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3831 *      when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3832 *      CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3833 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3834 *      information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3835 *      channel context is bound before this is called.
3836 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3837 *
3838 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3839 *      specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3840 *      if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3841 *
3842 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3843 *      and hardware limits.
3844 *
3845 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3846 *      is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3847 *      and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3848 *      driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3849 *      the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3850 *      The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3851 *      optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3852 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3853 *      peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3854 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3855 *      response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3856 *      parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3857 *      an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3858 *      response template is provided, together with the location of the
3859 *      switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3860 *      the function call.
3861 *
3862 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3863 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3864 *      synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3865 *      pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3866 *      currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3867 *
3868 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3869 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3870 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3871 *      contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3872 *      are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3873 *      The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3874 *      some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3875 *      changed parameters.
3876 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3877 *      cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3878 *      this call.
3879 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3880 *      ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3881 *      NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3882 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3883 *      aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3884 *      between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3885 *      skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3886 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3887 *      Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3888 *
3889 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3890 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3891 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3892 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3893 *      This callback may sleep.
3894 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
3895 *      This callback may sleep.
3896 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
3897 *      4-address mode
3898 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
3899 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
3900 *      to use rx decapsulation offload
3901 */
3902struct ieee80211_ops {
3903        void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3904                   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3905                   struct sk_buff *skb);
3906        int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3907        void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3908#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3909        int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3910        int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3911        void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3912#endif
3913        int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3914                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3915        int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3916                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3917                                enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3918        void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3919                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3920        int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3921        void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3922                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3923                                 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3924                                 u32 changed);
3925
3926        int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3927        void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3928
3929        u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3930                                 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3931        void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3932                                 unsigned int changed_flags,
3933                                 unsigned int *total_flags,
3934                                 u64 multicast);
3935        void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3936                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3937                                    unsigned int filter_flags,
3938                                    unsigned int changed_flags);
3939        int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3940                       bool set);
3941        int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3942                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3943                       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3944        void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3945                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3946                                struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3947                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3948                                u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3949        void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3950                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3951                               struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3952        void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3953                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3954        int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3955                       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3956        void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3957                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3958        int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3959                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3960                                struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3961                                struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3962        int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3963                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3964        void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3965                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3966                              const u8 *mac_addr);
3967        void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3968                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3969        int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3970                         struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3971        void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3972                            struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3973                            struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3974        int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3975        int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3976        int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3977                       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3978        int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3979                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3980#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3981        void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3983                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3984                                struct dentry *dir);
3985#endif
3986        void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3987                        enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3988        int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3989                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3990                             struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3991        int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3992                         struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3993                         enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3994                         enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3995        void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3996                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3997                                   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3998        void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3999                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4000                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4001                              u32 changed);
4002        void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4003                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4004                                    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4005        void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4006                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4007                               struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4008                               struct station_info *sinfo);
4009        int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4010                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
4011                       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4012        u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4013        void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4014                        u64 tsf);
4015        void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4016                           s64 offset);
4017        void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4018        int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4019
4020        /**
4021         * @ampdu_action:
4022         * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4023         * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4024         * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4025         * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4026         * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4027         * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4028         * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4029         * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4030         * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4031         *
4032         * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4033         * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4034         * - ``TX:        8..1...``
4035         *
4036         * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4037         * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4038         *
4039         * - ``TX:        1   or``
4040         * - ``TX:        18  or``
4041         * - ``TX:        81``
4042         *
4043         * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4044         *
4045         * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4046         * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4047         * if the session can start immediately.
4048         *
4049         * The callback can sleep.
4050         */
4051        int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4052                            struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4053                            struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4054        int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4055                struct survey_info *survey);
4056        void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4057        void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4058#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4059        int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4060                            void *data, int len);
4061        int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4062                             struct netlink_callback *cb,
4063                             void *data, int len);
4064#endif
4065        void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4066                      u32 queues, bool drop);
4067        void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4068                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4069                               struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4070        int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4071        int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4072
4073        int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4074                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4075                                 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4076                                 int duration,
4077                                 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4078        int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4079                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4080        int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4081        void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4082                              u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4083        bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4084        int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4085                                const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4086        void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4087                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4088                               const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4089
4090        void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4091                                      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4092                                      u16 tids, int num_frames,
4093                                      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4094                                      bool more_data);
4095        void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4096                                        struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4097                                        u16 tids, int num_frames,
4098                                        enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4099                                        bool more_data);
4100
4101        int     (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4102                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4103        void    (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4104                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4105                                struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4106        void    (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4107                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4108                                  u32 sset, u8 *data);
4109
4110        void    (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4111                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4112                                  u16 duration);
4113
4114        void    (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4115                                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4116
4117        int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4118                           struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4119        void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4120                               struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4121        void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4122                               struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4123                               u32 changed);
4124        int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4125                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4126                                  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4127        void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4128                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4129                                     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4130        int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4131                                  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4132                                  int n_vifs,
4133                                  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4134
4135        void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4136                                  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4137
4138#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4139        void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4140                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4141                                 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4142#endif
4143        void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4144                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4145                                      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4146        int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4147                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4148                                  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4149
4150        int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4151                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4152        void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4153                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4154        void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4155                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4156                                         struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4157
4158        int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4159        void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4160        u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4161                                       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4162        int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4163                           int *dbm);
4164
4165        int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4166                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4167                                   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4168                                   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4169                                   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4170        void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4171                                           struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4172                                           struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4173        void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4174                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4175                                         struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4176
4177        void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4178                              struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4179        void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4180
4181        int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4182                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4183                         struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4184        int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4185                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4186        int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4187                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4188                               struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4189        int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4190                            struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4191                            const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4192        void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4193                            struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4194                            u8 instance_id);
4195        bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4196                                       struct sk_buff *head,
4197                                       struct sk_buff *skb);
4198        int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4199                                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4200                                       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4201        int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4202                          struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4203        void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4204                           struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4205        int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4206                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4207                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4208                              struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4209        int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4210                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4211                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4212        void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4213                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4214        void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4215                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4216        int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4217                             const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4218        void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4219                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4220                                      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4221};
4222
4223/**
4224 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4225 *
4226 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4227 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4228 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4229 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4230 * @priv_data_len.
4231 *
4232 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4233 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4234 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4235 *      NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4236 *
4237 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4238 */
4239struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4240                                           const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4241                                           const char *requested_name);
4242
4243/**
4244 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4245 *
4246 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4247 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4248 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4249 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4250 * @priv_data_len.
4251 *
4252 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4253 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4254 *
4255 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4256 */
4257static inline
4258struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4259                                        const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4260{
4261        return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4262}
4263
4264/**
4265 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4266 *
4267 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4268 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4269 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4270 *
4271 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4272 *
4273 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4274 */
4275int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4276
4277/**
4278 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4279 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4280 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4281 *      (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4282 */
4283struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4284        int throughput;
4285        int blink_time;
4286};
4287
4288/**
4289 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4290 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4291 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4292 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4293 *      interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4294 */
4295enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4296        IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO          = BIT(0),
4297        IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK           = BIT(1),
4298        IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED      = BIT(2),
4299};
4300
4301#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4302const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4303const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4304const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4305const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4306const char *
4307__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4308                                   unsigned int flags,
4309                                   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4310                                   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4311#endif
4312/**
4313 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4314 *
4315 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4316 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4317 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4318 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4319 *
4320 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4321 *
4322 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4323 */
4324static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4325{
4326#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4327        return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4328#else
4329        return NULL;
4330#endif
4331}
4332
4333/**
4334 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4335 *
4336 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4337 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4338 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4339 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4340 *
4341 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4342 *
4343 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4344 */
4345static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4346{
4347#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4348        return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4349#else
4350        return NULL;
4351#endif
4352}
4353
4354/**
4355 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4356 *
4357 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4358 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4359 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4360 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4361 *
4362 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4363 *
4364 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4365 */
4366static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4367{
4368#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4369        return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4370#else
4371        return NULL;
4372#endif
4373}
4374
4375/**
4376 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4377 *
4378 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4379 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4380 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4381 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4382 *
4383 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4384 *
4385 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4386 */
4387static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4388{
4389#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4390        return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4391#else
4392        return NULL;
4393#endif
4394}
4395
4396/**
4397 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4398 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4399 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4400 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4401 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4402 *
4403 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4404 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4405 *
4406 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4407 */
4408static inline const char *
4409ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4410                                 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4411                                 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4412{
4413#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4414        return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4415                                                  blink_table_len);
4416#else
4417        return NULL;
4418#endif
4419}
4420
4421/**
4422 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4423 *
4424 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4425 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4426 *
4427 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4428 */
4429void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4430
4431/**
4432 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4433 *
4434 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4435 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4436 * before calling this function.
4437 *
4438 * @hw: the hardware to free
4439 */
4440void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4441
4442/**
4443 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4444 *
4445 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4446 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4447 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4448 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4449 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4450 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4451 *
4452 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4453 */
4454void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4455
4456/**
4457 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4458 *
4459 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4460 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4461 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4462 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4463 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4464 *
4465 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4466 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4467 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4468 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4469 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4470 *
4471 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4472 *
4473 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4474 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4475 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4476 * @list: the destination list
4477 */
4478void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4479                       struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4480
4481/**
4482 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4483 *
4484 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4485 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4486 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4487 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4488 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4489 *
4490 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4491 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4492 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4493 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4494 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4495 *
4496 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4497 *
4498 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4499 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4500 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4501 * @napi: the NAPI context
4502 */
4503void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4504                       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4505
4506/**
4507 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4508 *
4509 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4510 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4511 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4512 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4513 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4514 *
4515 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4516 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4517 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4518 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4519 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4520 *
4521 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4522 *
4523 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4524 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4525 */
4526static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4527{
4528        ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4529}
4530
4531/**
4532 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4533 *
4534 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4535 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4536 *
4537 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4538 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4539 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4540 *
4541 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4542 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4543 */
4544void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4545
4546/**
4547 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4548 *
4549 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4550 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4551 *
4552 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4553 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4554 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4555 *
4556 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4557 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4558 */
4559static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4560                                   struct sk_buff *skb)
4561{
4562        local_bh_disable();
4563        ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4564        local_bh_enable();
4565}
4566
4567/**
4568 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4569 *
4570 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4571 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4572 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4573 *
4574 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4575 *
4576 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4577 * each other.
4578 *
4579 * @sta: currently connected sta
4580 * @start: start or stop PS
4581 *
4582 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4583 */
4584int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4585
4586/**
4587 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4588 *                                  (in process context)
4589 *
4590 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4591 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4592 * applies.
4593 *
4594 * @sta: currently connected sta
4595 * @start: start or stop PS
4596 *
4597 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4598 */
4599static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4600                                                  bool start)
4601{
4602        int ret;
4603
4604        local_bh_disable();
4605        ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4606        local_bh_enable();
4607
4608        return ret;
4609}
4610
4611/**
4612 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4613 * @sta: currently connected station
4614 *
4615 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4616 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4617 * connected station was received.
4618 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4619 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4620 * be serialized.
4621 */
4622void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4623
4624/**
4625 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4626 * @sta: currently connected station
4627 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4628 *
4629 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4630 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4631 * from a connected station was received.
4632 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4633 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4634 * serialized.
4635 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4636 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4637 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4638 * checks.
4639 */
4640void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4641
4642/*
4643 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4644 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4645 */
4646#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM    ALIGN(14, 4)
4647
4648/**
4649 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4650 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4651 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4652 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4653 *
4654 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4655 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4656 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4657 *
4658 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4659 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4660 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4661 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4662 *
4663 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4664 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4665 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4666 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4667 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4668 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4669 *
4670 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4671 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4672 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4673 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4674 * use this API.
4675 */
4676void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4677                                u8 tid, bool buffered);
4678
4679/**
4680 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4681 *
4682 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4683 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4684 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4685 *
4686 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4687 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4688 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4689 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4690 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4691 */
4692void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4693                            struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4694                            struct sk_buff *skb,
4695                            struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4696                            int max_rates);
4697
4698/**
4699 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4700 *
4701 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4702 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4703 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4704 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4705 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4706 * slow stations to starve).
4707 *
4708 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4709 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4710 */
4711void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4712                                           u32 thr);
4713
4714/**
4715 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4716 *
4717 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4718 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4719 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4720 *
4721 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4722 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4723 * @info: tx status information
4724 */
4725void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4726                              struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4727                              struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4728
4729/**
4730 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4731 *
4732 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4733 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4734 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4735 *
4736 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4737 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4738 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4739 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4740 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4741 *
4742 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4743 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4744 */
4745void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4746                         struct sk_buff *skb);
4747
4748/**
4749 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4750 *
4751 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4752 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4753 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4754 *
4755 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4756 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4757 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4758 *
4759 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4760 * @status: tx status information
4761 */
4762void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4763                             struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4764
4765/**
4766 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4767 *
4768 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4769 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4770 * specific skbs.
4771 *
4772 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4773 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4774 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4775 *
4776 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4777 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4778 *      (NULL for multicast packets)
4779 * @info: tx status information
4780 */
4781static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4782                                             struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4783                                             struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4784{
4785        struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4786                .sta = sta,
4787                .info = info,
4788        };
4789
4790        ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4791}
4792
4793/**
4794 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4795 *
4796 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4797 *
4798 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4799 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4800 * for a single hardware.
4801 *
4802 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4803 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4804 */
4805static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4806                                          struct sk_buff *skb)
4807{
4808        local_bh_disable();
4809        ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4810        local_bh_enable();
4811}
4812
4813/**
4814 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4815 *
4816 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4817 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4818 *
4819 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4820 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4821 *
4822 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4823 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4824 */
4825void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4826                                 struct sk_buff *skb);
4827
4828/**
4829 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4830 *
4831 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4832 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4833 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4834 * 802.11 frames.
4835 *
4836 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4837 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4838 * calls in the same tx status family.
4839 *
4840 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4841 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4842 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4843 */
4844void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4845                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4846                               struct sk_buff *skb);
4847
4848/**
4849 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4850 *
4851 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4852 * connected STA.
4853 *
4854 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4855 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4856 */
4857void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4858
4859#define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4860
4861/**
4862 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4863 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4864 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4865 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4866 *      to countdown counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4867 *      should be ignored.
4868 */
4869struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4870        u16 tim_offset;
4871        u16 tim_length;
4872
4873        u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
4874};
4875
4876/**
4877 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4878 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4879 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4880 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4881 *      receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4882 *
4883 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4884 * obtain the beacon template.
4885 *
4886 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4887 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4888 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4889 * applicable, the CSA count.
4890 *
4891 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4892 *
4893 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4894 */
4895struct sk_buff *
4896ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4897                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4898                              struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4899
4900/**
4901 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4902 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4903 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4904 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4905 *      Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4906 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4907 *      (including the ID and length bytes!).
4908 *      Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4909 *
4910 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4911 * obtain the beacon frame.
4912 *
4913 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4914 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4915 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4916 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4917 *
4918 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4919 *
4920 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4921 */
4922struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4923                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4924                                         u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4925
4926/**
4927 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4928 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4929 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4930 *
4931 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4932 *
4933 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4934 */
4935static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4936                                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4937{
4938        return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4939}
4940
4941/**
4942 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
4943 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4944 *
4945 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4946 * This function is called implicitly when
4947 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4948 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4949 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
4950 *
4951 * Return: new countdown value
4952 */
4953u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4954
4955/**
4956 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
4957 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4958 * @counter: the new value for the counter
4959 *
4960 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
4961 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4962 *
4963 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
4964 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4965 */
4966void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4967
4968/**
4969 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4970 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4971 *
4972 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4973 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4974 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4975 */
4976void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4977
4978/**
4979 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
4980 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4981 *
4982 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
4983 */
4984bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4985
4986/**
4987 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4988 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4989 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4990 *
4991 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4992 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4993 *
4994 * Can only be called in AP mode.
4995 *
4996 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4997 */
4998struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4999                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5000
5001/**
5002 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
5003 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5004 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5005 *
5006 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5007 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5008 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5009 *
5010 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5011 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5012 *
5013 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5014 */
5015struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5016                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5017
5018/**
5019 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5020 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5021 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5022 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5023 *      if at all possible
5024 *
5025 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5026 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5027 * BSSID and address is used.
5028 *
5029 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5030 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5031 *
5032 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5033 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5034 *
5035 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5036 */
5037struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5038                                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5039                                       bool qos_ok);
5040
5041/**
5042 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5043 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5044 * @src_addr: source MAC address
5045 * @ssid: SSID buffer
5046 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5047 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5048 *
5049 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5050 * hardware.
5051 *
5052 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5053 */
5054struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5055                                       const u8 *src_addr,
5056                                       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5057                                       size_t tailroom);
5058
5059/**
5060 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5061 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5062 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5063 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5064 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5065 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5066 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5067 *
5068 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5069 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5070 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5071 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5072 */
5073void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5074                       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5075                       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5076                       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5077
5078/**
5079 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5080 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5081 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5082 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5083 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5084 *
5085 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5086 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5087 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5088 *
5089 * Return: The duration.
5090 */
5091__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5092                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5093                              const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5094
5095/**
5096 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5097 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5098 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5099 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5100 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5101 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5102 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5103 *
5104 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5105 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5106 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5107 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5108 */
5109void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5110                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5111                             const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5112                             const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5113                             struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5114
5115/**
5116 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5117 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5118 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5119 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5120 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5121 *
5122 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5123 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5124 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5125 *
5126 * Return: The duration.
5127 */
5128__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5129                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5130                                    size_t frame_len,
5131                                    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5132
5133/**
5134 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5135 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5136 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5137 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5138 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5139 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5140 *
5141 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5142 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5143 *
5144 * Return: The duration.
5145 */
5146__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5147                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5148                                        enum nl80211_band band,
5149                                        size_t frame_len,
5150                                        struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5151
5152/**
5153 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5154 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5155 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5156 *
5157 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5158 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5159 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5160 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5161 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5162 *
5163 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5164 * frames are available.
5165 *
5166 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5167 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5168 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5169 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5170 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5171 * use common code for all beacons.
5172 */
5173struct sk_buff *
5174ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5175
5176/**
5177 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5178 *
5179 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5180 *
5181 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5182 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5183 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5184 */
5185void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5186                               u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5187
5188/**
5189 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5190 *
5191 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5192 * from the given packet.
5193 *
5194 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5195 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5196 *      with this P1K
5197 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5198 */
5199static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5200                                          struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5201{
5202        struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5203        const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5204        u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5205
5206        ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5207}
5208
5209/**
5210 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5211 *
5212 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5213 * and transmitter address.
5214 *
5215 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5216 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5217 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5218 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5219 */
5220void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5221                               const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5222
5223/**
5224 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5225 *
5226 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5227 * in the packet.
5228 *
5229 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5230 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5231 *      encrypted with this key
5232 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5233 */
5234void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5235                            struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5236
5237/**
5238 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5239 *
5240 * @pos: start of crypto header
5241 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5242 * @pn: PN to add
5243 *
5244 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5245 * the packet payload)
5246 *
5247 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5248 * point to the crypto header)
5249 */
5250u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5251
5252/**
5253 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5254 *
5255 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5256 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5257 *      the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5258 *      CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5259 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5260 *
5261 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5262 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5263 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5264 *
5265 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5266 * can be done concurrently.
5267 */
5268void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5269                              int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5270
5271/**
5272 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5273 *
5274 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5275 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5276 *      the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5277 *      CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5278 * @seq: new sequence data
5279 *
5280 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5281 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5282 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5283 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5284 *
5285 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5286 * can be done concurrently.
5287 */
5288void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5289                              int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5290
5291/**
5292 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5293 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5294 *
5295 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5296 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5297 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5298 *
5299 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5300 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5301 */
5302void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5303
5304/**
5305 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5306 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5307 * @keyconf: new key data
5308 *
5309 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5310 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5311 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5312 *
5313 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5314 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5315 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5316 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5317 *
5318 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5319 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5320 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5321 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5322 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5323 * of the reconfiguration.
5324 *
5325 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5326 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5327 *
5328 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5329 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5330 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5331 * the key that's being replaced.
5332 */
5333struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5334ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5335                        struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5336
5337/**
5338 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5339 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5340 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5341 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5342 * @gfp: allocation flags
5343 */
5344void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5345                                const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5346
5347/**
5348 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5349 *
5350 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5351 * at the same time.
5352 *
5353 * @keyconf: the key in question
5354 */
5355void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5356
5357/**
5358 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5359 *
5360 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5361 * at the same time.
5362 *
5363 * @keyconf: the key in question
5364 */
5365void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5366
5367/**
5368 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5369 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5370 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5371 *
5372 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5373 */
5374void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5375
5376/**
5377 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5378 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5379 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5380 *
5381 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5382 */
5383void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5384
5385/**
5386 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5387 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5388 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5389 *
5390 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5391 *
5392 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5393 */
5394
5395int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5396
5397/**
5398 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5399 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5400 *
5401 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5402 */
5403void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5404
5405/**
5406 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5407 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5408 *
5409 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5410 */
5411void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5412
5413/**
5414 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5415 *
5416 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5417 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5418 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5419 * any context, including hardirq context.
5420 *
5421 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5422 * @info: information about the completed scan
5423 */
5424void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5425                              struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5426
5427/**
5428 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5429 *
5430 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5431 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5432 *
5433 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5434 */
5435void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5436
5437/**
5438 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5439 *
5440 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5441 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5442 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5443 * while associating, for instance.
5444 *
5445 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5446 */
5447void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5448
5449/**
5450 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5451 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5452 *      been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5453 *      reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5454 *      interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5455 *      haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5456 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5457 *      interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5458 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5459 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5460 *      is not in the driver.  This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5461 *      for instance.
5462 */
5463enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5464        IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL     = 0,
5465        IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5466        IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE     = BIT(1),
5467        IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER        = BIT(2),
5468};
5469
5470/**
5471 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5472 *
5473 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5474 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5475 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5476 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5477 *
5478 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5479 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5480 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5481 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5482 */
5483void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5484                                  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5485                                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5486                                  void *data);
5487
5488/**
5489 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5490 *
5491 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5492 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5493 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5494 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5495 * be used.
5496 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5497 *
5498 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5499 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5500 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5501 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5502 */
5503static inline void
5504ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5505                                    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5506                                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5507                                    void *data)
5508{
5509        ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5510                                     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5511                                     iterator, data);
5512}
5513
5514/**
5515 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5516 *
5517 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5518 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5519 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5520 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5521 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5522 *
5523 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5524 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5525 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5526 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5527 */
5528void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5529                                                u32 iter_flags,
5530                                                void (*iterator)(void *data,
5531                                                    u8 *mac,
5532                                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5533                                                void *data);
5534
5535/**
5536 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
5537 *
5538 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5539 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5540 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
5541 *
5542 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5543 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5544 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5545 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5546 */
5547void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5548                                             u32 iter_flags,
5549                                             void (*iterator)(void *data,
5550                                                u8 *mac,
5551                                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5552                                             void *data);
5553
5554/**
5555 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5556 *
5557 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5558 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5559 * function for them.
5560 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5561 *
5562 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5563 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5564 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5565 */
5566void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5567                                       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5568                                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5569                                       void *data);
5570/**
5571 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5572 *
5573 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5574 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5575 *
5576 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5577 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5578 */
5579void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5580
5581/**
5582 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5583 *
5584 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5585 * workqueue.
5586 *
5587 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5588 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5589 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5590 */
5591void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5592                                  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5593                                  unsigned long delay);
5594
5595/**
5596 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5597 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5598 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5599 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5600 *
5601 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5602 *
5603 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5604 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5605 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5606 */
5607int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5608                                  u16 timeout);
5609
5610/**
5611 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5612 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5613 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5614 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5615 *
5616 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5617 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5618 * from any context.
5619 */
5620void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5621                                      u16 tid);
5622
5623/**
5624 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5625 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5626 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5627 *
5628 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5629 *
5630 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5631 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5632 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5633 */
5634int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5635
5636/**
5637 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5638 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5639 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5640 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5641 *
5642 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5643 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5644 * can be called from any context.
5645 */
5646void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5647                                     u16 tid);
5648
5649/**
5650 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5651 *
5652 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5653 * @addr: station's address
5654 *
5655 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5656 *
5657 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5658 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5659 */
5660struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5661                                         const u8 *addr);
5662
5663/**
5664 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5665 *
5666 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5667 * @addr: remote station's address
5668 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5669 *
5670 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5671 *
5672 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5673 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5674 *
5675 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5676 *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5677 *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5678 *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5679 *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5680 *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5681 *      is not reliable.
5682 *
5683 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5684 */
5685struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5686                                               const u8 *addr,
5687                                               const u8 *localaddr);
5688
5689/**
5690 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5691 * @hw: the hardware
5692 * @pubsta: the station
5693 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5694 *
5695 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5696 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5697 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5698 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5699 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5700 *
5701 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5702 * manner.
5703 *
5704 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5705 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5706 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5707 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5708 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5709 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5710 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5711 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5712 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5713 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5714 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5715 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5716 * woke up while blocked or not.
5717 */
5718void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5719                               struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5720
5721/**
5722 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5723 * @pubsta: the station
5724 *
5725 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5726 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5727 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5728 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5729 *
5730 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5731 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5732 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5733 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5734 *
5735 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5736 *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5737 *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5738 *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5739 */
5740void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5741
5742/**
5743 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5744 * @pubsta: the station
5745 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5746 *
5747 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5748 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5749 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5750 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5751 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5752 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5753 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5754 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5755 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5756 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5757 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5758 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5759 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5760 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5761 */
5762void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5763
5764/**
5765 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5766 *
5767 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
5768 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5769 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5770 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5771 *
5772 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5773 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5774 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5775 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5776 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5777 * attempts.
5778 *
5779 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5780 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5781 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5782 * them to 0.
5783 *
5784 * @pubsta: the station
5785 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5786 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5787 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5788 */
5789void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5790                                    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5791
5792/**
5793 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5794 *
5795 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5796 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5797 *
5798 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5799 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5800 */
5801bool
5802ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5803
5804/**
5805 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5806 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5807 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5808 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5809 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5810 *
5811 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5812 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5813 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5814 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5815 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5816 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5817 *
5818 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5819 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5820 * set_key callback.
5821 */
5822void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5823                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5824                         void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5825                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5826                                      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5827                                      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5828                                      void *data),
5829                         void *iter_data);
5830
5831/**
5832 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5833 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5834 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5835 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5836 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5837 *
5838 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5839 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5840 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5841 * in removal process will be skipped.
5842 *
5843 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5844 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5845 */
5846void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5847                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5848                             void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5849                                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5850                                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5851                                          struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5852                                          void *data),
5853                             void *iter_data);
5854
5855/**
5856 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5857 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5858 * @iter: iterator function
5859 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5860 *
5861 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5862 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5863 * places while calling into the driver.
5864 *
5865 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5866 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5867 * removed.
5868 *
5869 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5870 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5871 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5872 * or not.
5873 */
5874void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5875        struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5876        void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5877                     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5878                     void *data),
5879        void *iter_data);
5880
5881/**
5882 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5883 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5884 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5885 *
5886 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5887 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5888 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5889 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5890 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5891 * %NULL.
5892 *
5893 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5894 */
5895struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5896                                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5897
5898/**
5899 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5900 *
5901 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5902 *
5903 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5904 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5905 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5906 */
5907void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5908
5909/**
5910 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5911 *
5912 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5913 *
5914 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5915 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5916 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5917 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5918 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5919 *
5920 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5921 * without connection recovery attempts.
5922 */
5923void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5924
5925/**
5926 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
5927 *
5928 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5929 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
5930 *
5931 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
5932 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
5933 */
5934void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
5935
5936/**
5937 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5938 *
5939 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5940 *
5941 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5942 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5943 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5944 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5945 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5946 *
5947 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5948 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5949 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5950 * disconnect normally later.
5951 *
5952 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5953 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5954 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5955 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5956 */
5957void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5958
5959/**
5960 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5961 *      rssi threshold triggered
5962 *
5963 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5964 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5965 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5966 * @gfp: context flags
5967 *
5968 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5969 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5970 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5971 */
5972void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5973                               enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5974                               s32 rssi_level,
5975                               gfp_t gfp);
5976
5977/**
5978 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5979 *
5980 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5981 * @gfp: context flags
5982 */
5983void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5984
5985/**
5986 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5987 *
5988 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5989 */
5990void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5991
5992/**
5993 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5994 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5995 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5996 *
5997 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5998 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5999 */
6000void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
6001
6002/**
6003 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6004 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6005 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6006 *
6007 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6008 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6009 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6010 */
6011void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6012                            enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6013
6014/**
6015 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6016 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6017 */
6018void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6019
6020/**
6021 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6022 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6023 */
6024void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6025
6026/**
6027 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6028 *
6029 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6030 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6031 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6032 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6033 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6034 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6035 *
6036 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6037 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6038 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6039 */
6040void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6041                                  const u8 *addr);
6042
6043/**
6044 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6045 * @pubsta: station struct
6046 * @tid: the session's TID
6047 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6048 *      assumed to be out of the window after the call
6049 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6050 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6051 *
6052 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6053 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6054 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6055 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6056 */
6057void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6058                                          u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6059                                          u16 received_mpdus);
6060
6061/**
6062 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6063 *
6064 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6065 * buffer.
6066 *
6067 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6068 * @ra: the peer's destination address
6069 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6070 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6071 */
6072void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6073
6074/**
6075 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6076 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6077 * @addr: station mac address
6078 * @tid: the rx tid
6079 */
6080void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6081                                 unsigned int tid);
6082
6083/**
6084 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6085 *
6086 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6087 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6088 * reordering.
6089 *
6090 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6091 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6092 *
6093 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6094 * @addr: station mac address
6095 * @tid: the rx tid
6096 */
6097static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6098                                                      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6099{
6100        if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6101                return;
6102        ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6103}
6104
6105/**
6106 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6107 *
6108 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6109 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6110 * reordering.
6111 *
6112 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6113 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6114 *
6115 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6116 * @addr: station mac address
6117 * @tid: the rx tid
6118 */
6119static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6120                                                     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6121{
6122        if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6123                return;
6124        ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6125}
6126
6127/**
6128 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6129 *
6130 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6131 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6132 *
6133 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6134 *
6135 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6136 * @addr: station mac address
6137 * @tid: the rx tid
6138 */
6139void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6140                                   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6141
6142/* Rate control API */
6143
6144/**
6145 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6146 *
6147 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6148 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6149 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6150 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6151 *      to be filled in
6152 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6153 *      which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6154 *      used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6155 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6156 *      RTS threshold
6157 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6158 *      if the selected rate supports it
6159 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6160 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6161 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6162 */
6163struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6164        struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6165        struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6166        struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6167        struct sk_buff *skb;
6168        struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6169        bool rts, short_preamble;
6170        u32 rate_idx_mask;
6171        u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6172        bool bss;
6173};
6174
6175/**
6176 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6177 */
6178enum rate_control_capabilities {
6179        /**
6180         * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6181         * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6182         * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6183         * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6184         * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6185         */
6186        RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6187};
6188
6189struct rate_control_ops {
6190        unsigned long capa;
6191        const char *name;
6192        void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6193        void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6194                            struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6195        void (*free)(void *priv);
6196
6197        void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6198        void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6199                          struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6200                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6201        void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6202                            struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6203                            struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6204                            u32 changed);
6205        void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6206                         void *priv_sta);
6207
6208        void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6209                              struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6210                              void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6211        void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6212                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6213                          struct sk_buff *skb);
6214        void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6215                         struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6216
6217        void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6218                                struct dentry *dir);
6219
6220        u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6221};
6222
6223static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6224                                 enum nl80211_band band,
6225                                 int index)
6226{
6227        return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6228}
6229
6230static inline s8
6231rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6232                  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6233{
6234        int i;
6235
6236        for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6237                if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6238                        return i;
6239
6240        /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6241        WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6242
6243        /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6244        return 0;
6245}
6246
6247static inline
6248bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6249                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6250{
6251        unsigned int i;
6252
6253        for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6254                if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6255                        return true;
6256        return false;
6257}
6258
6259/**
6260 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6261 *
6262 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6263 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6264 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6265 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6266 *
6267 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6268 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6269 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6270 */
6271int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6272                           struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6273                           struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6274
6275int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6276void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6277
6278static inline bool
6279conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6280{
6281        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6282}
6283
6284static inline bool
6285conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6286{
6287        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6288               conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6289}
6290
6291static inline bool
6292conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6293{
6294        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6295               conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6296}
6297
6298static inline bool
6299conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6300{
6301        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6302}
6303
6304static inline bool
6305conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6306{
6307        return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6308                (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6309                (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6310}
6311
6312static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6313ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6314{
6315        if (p2p) {
6316                switch (type) {
6317                case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6318                        return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6319                case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6320                        return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6321                default:
6322                        break;
6323                }
6324        }
6325        return type;
6326}
6327
6328static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6329ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6330{
6331        return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6332}
6333
6334/**
6335 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6336 *
6337 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6338 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6339 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6340 *
6341 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6342 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6343 * matching GroupId management frame.
6344 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6345 */
6346void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6347                                const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6348
6349void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6350                                   int rssi_min_thold,
6351                                   int rssi_max_thold);
6352
6353void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6354
6355/**
6356 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6357 *
6358 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6359 *
6360 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6361 *
6362 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6363 * applicable.
6364 */
6365int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6366
6367/**
6368 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6369 * @vif: virtual interface
6370 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6371 * @gfp: allocation flags
6372 *
6373 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6374 */
6375void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6376                                    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6377                                    gfp_t gfp);
6378
6379/**
6380 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6381 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6382 * @vif: virtual interface
6383 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6384 * @band: the band to transmit on
6385 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6386 *
6387 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6388 */
6389bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6390                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6391                              int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6392
6393/**
6394 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6395 *                               of injected frames.
6396 *
6397 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
6398 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
6399 * of the skb before calling this function.
6400 *
6401 * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6402 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6403 */
6404bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6405                                 struct net_device *dev);
6406
6407/**
6408 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6409 *
6410 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6411 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6412 *
6413 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6414 *
6415 * private:
6416 *
6417 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6418 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6419 */
6420struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6421        u32 next_tsf;
6422        bool has_next_tsf;
6423
6424        u8 absent;
6425
6426        u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6427        struct {
6428                u32 start;
6429                u32 duration;
6430                u32 interval;
6431        } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6432};
6433
6434/**
6435 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6436 *
6437 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6438 * @data: NoA tracking data
6439 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6440 *
6441 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6442 */
6443int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6444                            struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6445
6446/**
6447 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6448 *
6449 * @data: NoA tracking data
6450 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6451 */
6452void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6453
6454/**
6455 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6456 * @vif: virtual interface
6457 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6458 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6459 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6460 * @gfp: allocation flags
6461 *
6462 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6463 */
6464void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6465                                 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6466                                 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6467
6468/**
6469 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6470 *
6471 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6472 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6473 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6474 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6475 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6476 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6477 *
6478 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6479 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6480 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6481 *
6482 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6483 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6484 *
6485 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6486 */
6487int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6488
6489/**
6490 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6491 *
6492 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6493 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6494 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6495 *
6496 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6497 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6498 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6499 *
6500 * @sta: the station
6501 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6502 */
6503void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6504
6505/**
6506 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6507 *
6508 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6509 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6510 *      ieee80211_next_txq()
6511 *
6512 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6513 *
6514 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6515 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6516 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6517 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6518 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6519 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6520 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6521 *
6522 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6523 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6524 */
6525struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6526                                     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6527
6528/**
6529 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6530 * (in process context)
6531 *
6532 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6533 * (internally disables bottom halves).
6534 *
6535 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6536 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6537 *      ieee80211_next_txq()
6538 */
6539static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6540                                                      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6541{
6542        struct sk_buff *skb;
6543
6544        local_bh_disable();
6545        skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6546        local_bh_enable();
6547
6548        return skb;
6549}
6550
6551/**
6552 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6553 *
6554 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6555 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6556 *
6557 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6558 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6559 * driver has finished scheduling it.
6560 */
6561struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6562
6563/**
6564 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6565 *
6566 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6567 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6568 *
6569 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6570 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6571 */
6572void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6573
6574/* (deprecated) */
6575static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6576{
6577}
6578
6579void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6580                              struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6581
6582/**
6583 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6584 *
6585 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6586 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6587 *
6588 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6589 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6590 *
6591 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6592 * this TXQ internally.
6593 */
6594static inline void
6595ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6596{
6597        __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6598}
6599
6600/**
6601 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6602 *
6603 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6604 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6605 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6606 *
6607 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6608 * internally.
6609 */
6610static inline void
6611ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6612                     bool force)
6613{
6614        __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6615}
6616
6617/**
6618 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6619 *
6620 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6621 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6622 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6623 * next_txq().
6624 *
6625 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6626 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6627 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6628 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6629 * again.
6630 *
6631 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6632 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6633 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6634 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6635 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6636 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6637 *
6638 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6639 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6640 */
6641bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6642                                struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6643
6644/**
6645 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6646 *
6647 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6648 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6649 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6650 *
6651 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6652 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6653 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6654 */
6655void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6656                             unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6657                             unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6658
6659/**
6660 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6661 *
6662 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6663 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6664 *
6665 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6666 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6667 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6668 * @gfp: allocation flags
6669 */
6670void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6671                                   u8 inst_id,
6672                                   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6673                                   gfp_t gfp);
6674
6675/**
6676 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6677 *
6678 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6679 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6680 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6681 *
6682 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6683 * @match: match event information
6684 * @gfp: allocation flags
6685 */
6686void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6687                              struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6688                              gfp_t gfp);
6689
6690/**
6691 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6692 *
6693 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6694 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6695 *
6696 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6697 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6698 *          information.
6699 * @len: frame length in bytes
6700 */
6701u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6702                              struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6703                              int len);
6704
6705/**
6706 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6707 *
6708 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6709 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6710 *
6711 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6712 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6713 * @len: frame length in bytes
6714 */
6715u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6716                              struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6717                              int len);
6718/**
6719 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6720 *
6721 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6722 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6723 * hardware or firmware.
6724 *
6725 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6726 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6727 */
6728bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6729
6730/**
6731 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
6732 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6733 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6734 *
6735 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6736 *
6737 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
6738 */
6739struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6740                                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6741
6742/**
6743 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
6744 *      probe response template.
6745 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6746 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6747 *
6748 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6749 *
6750 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
6751 */
6752struct sk_buff *
6753ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6754                                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6755#endif /* MAC80211_H */
6756